2008 Saturn AURA Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using this Manual
{ CAUTION:
Read this owner manual from beginning to end to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures
and words work together to explain things.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Index
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the
Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number
where it can be found.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do this”
or “Do Not let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Notices are also used in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move a manual seat forward or rearward:
1. Lift the bar to unlock
Front Seats
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats
Manual Lumbar
On vehicles with this
feature, the handle is
located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Move the handle up or down repeatedly to decrease or
increase lumbar support.
In vehicles with power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of
the seat.
To adjust the seat:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle may have heated front seats.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
The buttons are located
on the outboard side of
the driver’s and front
passenger’s seats.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Press the top of the switch to turn the feature on. The
seat will heat to the high setting. The indicator light
above the switch will be lit next to the number 2.
{ CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Press the top of the switch again to go to the low heat
setting. The indicator light will be lit next to the
number 1.
Press the bottom of the switch to turn the feature off.
The heated seat feature will turn off when the ignition is
turned off.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of
the seat.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback returns to the upright
position.
2. Release the lever to lock the seatback.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control
used to recline them is located on the outboard side
of the seat behind the power seat control.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the restraint up to
raise it. To lower the
Power Lift Seat
head restraint, press the
button, located on the
top of the seatback, and
push the restraint down.
The rear seat head rests are also adjustable.
To adjust a power lift seat, press the top or bottom of
the power lift seat switch to raise or lower the seat.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
With this feature, you can fold either side of the seatback
down for more cargo space. Make sure the front seat
is not reclined. If it is, the rear seatback will not fold
down all the way.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
To lower the rear seatback, pull up on the seatback
strap while folding the seatback down. This allows
access to the trunk.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To raise the rear seatback pull the seatback up and
make sure it latches. Push and pull on the seatback
to be sure it is locked in position. Make sure that
the safety belts are properly stowed over the seatback
in all three positions.
{ CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the
upright locked position.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash
and you are not wearing a safety belt, your
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from it
and be seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up.
Always fasten your safety belt, and check that
your passenger(s) are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
for additional information.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without safety belts, they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and snug on the
hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the
belt go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in
this section.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
belt should go back out of the way. When the safety
belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety belt
webbing. The latch plate should rest on the stitching
on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger position.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met.
And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt
pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a
side crash.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To move it up or down,
squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the
height adjuster and move
the height adjuster to
the desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to make
sure it has locked into position.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip,
and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and
clip inward and slide them in between the seatback and
the interior body, leaving only the loop of the elastic cord
exposed.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety Belt Extender
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
If the safety belt will fasten around you, you should
use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been
designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{ CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same
safety belt. The safety belt can not properly
spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A safety belt must be used by only
one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with
the shoulder belt behind their back. A child
can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child
would not be restrained by the shoulder belt.
The child could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
The child might also slide under the lap belt.
The belt force would then be applied right on
the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly can
strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
In addition, young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone; they need to use a child restraint.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
{ CAUTION:
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle and never
allow children to play with the safety belts.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is
also better to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front seat. Secure a
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury
during a crash, infants need complete support.
This is because an infant’s neck is not fully
developed and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child restraint settles
into the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
should always be secured in rear-facing child
restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the
seating surface against the
back of the infant.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not
remain low on the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around the child’s
abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force on a body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone could cause
serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young
children should always be secured in
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
appropriate child restraints.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the
harness.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint
properly in the vehicle using the vehicle’s
safety belt or LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that child restraint
and the instructions in this manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint. Secure the child properly
following the instructions that came with that
child restraint.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a
forward position.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
for additional information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Configurations for Use of Child
Restraints
A. Child restraint using
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
LATCH
B. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
If you secure a child restraint in the left or center rear
seat using LATCH, review the following illustrations.
Depending on where you place the child restraint, you
may not be able to access certain safety belt assemblies
or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child
restraints.
A. Occupant prohibited
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Child restraint using
LATCH
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
B. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
C. Child restraint using
safety belt or LATCH
or occupant using
safety belt
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
A. Child restraint or
occupant using
safety belt
B. Child restraint using
LATCH
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
rear anchor position has
a label, near the crease
between the seatback
and the seat cushion,
showing where the
anchors are located.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Rear Seat
The top tether anchors are located behind the rear seat
on the filler panel.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Install a LATCH-type child restraint properly
using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with the child restraint
and the instructions in this manual.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to
a single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured. To reduce the risk of serious or
fatal injuries during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the child restraint will not be able
to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or killed.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to
its stowed position.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle
any unused safety belts behind the child
restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in
page 1-39. Depending on where you place the child
restraint, you may not be able to access certain safety
belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional
passengers or child restraints.
You cannot secure three child restraints using the
LATCH anchors in the rear seat at the same time,
but you can install two of them. If you want to do this,
install one LATCH child restraint in the passenger-side
position, and install the other one either in the
driver-side position or in the center position. Refer to
the following illustration to learn which anchors to use.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system is designed to make installation of child
restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use
the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead use the vehicle’s
anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the
restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
A. Passenger Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
B. Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
C. Driver Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors
Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper
anchor location.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. If the position you are using has an
adjustable headrest or head restraint,
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to the child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a single
tether, route the tether
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether route the tether
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts. See Head Restraints
on page 1-7.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using
a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
tether anchor locations.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
more information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a
forward position.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the
top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Even if the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
on this, including important safety information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
CAUTION: (Continued)
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
page 3-33.
for additional information.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
page 1-42 for how to install your child restraint
using LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
top tether anchor locations.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint
is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must
inflate very quickly to do their job.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
{ CAUTION:
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help
keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags and roof-rail
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe crashes where something hits the side
of your vehicle. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or
roof-rail airbags.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
{ CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle
with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie
down through any door or window opening.
If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail
airbag will be blocked.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are not
intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck. A roof-rail airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what
the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly
the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the
location and severity of the side impact.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail
side impact and roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. Seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed threshold level.
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the
airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side
windows that have occupant seating positions.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{ CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated
for some time after they deploy. Some components
of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust
in the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma or
other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard
warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can
lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn the
hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for
those features.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when you start your vehicle.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start to start your vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the word
OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will be
page 3-33.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver’s
airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a
forward position.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though the
airbag(s) are off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure the
child restraint in a rear seat.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if:
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer to
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that
the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline
the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if
possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
Remove any additional material from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat
massagers before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer/retailer.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in
the right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger
sensing system has allowed the airbags to be enabled,
the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the
airbags are active.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off. See
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child
restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether
or not there is an airbag for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any additional
material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat
covers, seat heaters or seat massagers and ask the
person to place the seatback in the fully upright position,
then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
two to three minutes. This will allow the system to detect
that person and then enable the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment other than any that GM has approved for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
information about modifications that can affect how
the system operates.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-32 for more on this, including
important safety information.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat
or between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle and
the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close
to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-32 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see What
your dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, check the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have had a crash, do you need new safety belts
or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
not being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and children could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer
or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.
Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
page 7-7.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
feature, press / to start the engine from outside
the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away, however, the
operating range may be less while the vehicle is running.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. The interior
lamps turn off after all of the doors are closed. If enabled
through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the remote
lock feedback can be programmed to have the horn chirp
and/or the turn signals flash when the RKE transmitter is
used to lock the vehicle’s doors. See “LOCK HORN” and
page 3-52 for more information.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Pressing Q may also arm the content theft-deterrent
With Remote Start
Shown, Without Remote
Start Similar
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the driver’s door. If K is
pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors
unlock. The interior lamps turn on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled
through the DIC, the remote unlock feedback can be
programmed to have the horn chirp and/or the turn
signals flash when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock
the vehicle’s doors. See “UNLOCK HORN” and “LIGHT
for more information.
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for
about one second to open the trunk. The trunk can be
opened with the transmitter when the vehicle speed
is less than 2 mph (3 km/h) or when the ignition is off.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate your vehicle. The horn sounds three times
and the headlamps and turn signals flash three times.
Press and hold L for about three seconds to initiate
the panic alarm. The horn sounds and the headlamps
and turn signals flash for 30 seconds. Press L again
to cancel the panic alarm.
If enabled through the DIC, and it is dark enough outside,
the vehicle’s high-beam headlamps, parking lamps, and
back-up lamps turn on each time K on the transmitter is
pressed. These exterior lamps stay on for 20 seconds,
or until a door is opened. See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS”
additional information.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is
lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through
your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to be re-coded
to match the new transmitter. The lost transmitter will
no longer work after the new transmitters are re-coded.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters
matched to it.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
page 2-17.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:
Battery Replacement
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,
thin object inserted into the notch on the side.
Replace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT (Battery)
LOW message displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB
BATT (Battery) LOW” under DIC Warnings and
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning
systems and rear window defogger. When the remote
start system is active and the vehicle has an automatic
climate control system, it will automatically regulate
the inside temperature. Normal operation of these
systems will return after the ignition key is turned
to ON/RUN.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The remote start feature provides two separate starts
per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of engine running
time, or one start with a time extension. The first start
must expire or be canceled to get two separate 10 minute
starts.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while
the vehicle is running.
If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been
driven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is still
running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes
from the time you repeat the steps for remote starting.
The remote start running time can be extended one time
and only after the first remote start.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
information.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,
unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle’s
key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to
ON/RUN.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s
remote start button for about four seconds or until the
vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The doors will lock.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on
and remain on while the engine is running.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any
of the follow occur:
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and release the remote start button.
• The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
• The vehicle’s hood is open.
• Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF position
and then back to LOCK/OFF.
• The hazard warning flashers are on.
The parking lamps turn off to indicate the engine is off.
After the engine has been started two times, or one
time with a time extension, the vehicle’s ignition must
be turned to ON/RUN using the key before the remote
start procedure can be used again. See Ignition
the ignition positions on your vehicle.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
• Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a time
extension, have already been provided for that
ignition cycle.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote start system
enabled. The system may be enabled or disabled
through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DIC
information.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
From the outside, use your key or Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one.
Turn the key counterclockwise to unlock the door.
Door Locks
From the inside, lock and unlock the door by moving the
manual lock knob down and up, or by using the power
door lock switches.
{ CAUTION:
Power Door Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
The power door lock switches are located on the
driver’s and front passenger’s door.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
Press the outboard side of the switch to unlock all
doors. Press the inboard side of the switch to lock all
doors.
The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.
Rear seat passengers must use the manual lock
knob on their doors.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Door Ajar Reminder
If one of the doors is not fully closed while the ignition
is on and the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL (N) the following will occur:
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.
• A chime will sound.
• The DOOR AJAR message will display through
the Driver Information Center (DIC) until the door
page 3-47.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Locking
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
This feature allows the driver to delay the locking of the
vehicle. It will not operate with the key in the ignition.
Your vehicle is programmed at the factory to lock all
doors automatically when the following are met:
Press the driver’s power door lock switch or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock button once.
With the key removed from the ignition and the driver’s
door open, the following occurs:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK (P).
This feature cannot be disabled.
• Three chimes sound to signal the delay.
• All doors will lock and the turn signals flash once
five seconds after the last door has been closed.
When the shift lever is moved back to PARK (P), all
doors will unlock.
• The horn chirps if the horn chirp feature is enabled.
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are
locked, have that person use the manual lock knob
or power door unlock switch.
If a door is opened before the five seconds has elapsed,
the doors do not lock until five seconds after all doors
are closed.
The power door unlock function can be programmed
through prompts displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). These prompts allow you to choose unlock
If the power door lock switch or the transmitter lock
button is pressed twice when leaving the vehicle, the
doors lock immediately.
If the power door unlock switch or the transmitter unlock
button is pressed, the doors unlock immediately and
do not lock automatically after the doors are closed.
This feature is turned on at the factory but may be
turned off through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use these locks, do the following:
Rear Door Security Locks
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
Your vehicle has rear door security locks, that prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
2. Close the door.
The rear door security locks are located on the inside
edge of each rear door. You must open the rear doors to
access them.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
To assist you in finding the lock, your vehicle will have
one of the following:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power
door lock switch, or by lifting the rear door
manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout Protection
{ CAUTION:
This feature prevents the driver’s door from being
locked using the power door locks, if the key is left
in the ignition and a door is open.
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk
lid open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
Press the power door lock switch to lock all the doors
and then unlock the driver’s door.
Press and hold the power door lock switch for more
than three seconds to override this feature.
If the key is removed from the ignition, or if the
manual door lock or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is used, the key could still be locked
inside the vehicle. Always remember to take the
key with you.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Trunk
To open the trunk from the outside, press the trunk
release button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Press the button located
on the driver’s door near
the map pocket to open
the trunk.
The trunk can only be opened while the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
To close the trunk use the pullstrap located on the
trunk lid.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch.
This handle glows following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle up to open the trunk from the inside.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Up Window
Power Windows
On windows with this feature, pull the switch up to the
second position and release the switch to activate the
express-up feature. To stop the window as it is raising,
pull up or press down briefly on the switch again.
The power window
switches are located on
the armrest on the driver’s
door. In addition, each
passenger door has a
switch for its own window.
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram the driver’s power window for the express-up
feature to work. Replace or recharge the vehicle’s battery
before reprogramming.
To program the driver’s window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN, or
when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active,
close all doors.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window has an express-down feature.
This switch is labeled AUTO. Press the front all the
way down and release, to lower the window all the
way down automatically.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is
fully closed.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front
of the switch momentarily. To raise the window, pull
and hold the front of the switch.
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely
closed.
The window is now reprogrammed.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window stops at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also
cause the window to auto-reverse. The window returns
to normal operation once the obstruction or condition
is removed.
Window Lockout
The driver’s power window controls also include a
lockout button.
o (Window Lockout): Press the lockout button to
stop the rear passengers from using their window
switches. The driver and front passenger can still
operate all the windows with the lock on. When the
red part of the switch is visible you have returned
to normal window operation.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
{ CAUTION:
Sun Visors
If express override is activated, the window
will not reverse automatically. You or others
could be injured and the window could be
damaged. Before you use express override,
make sure that all people and obstructions
are clear of the window path.
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also remove them from the center mount
and swing them to the side, to block out glare from
the side.
Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors
located on the passenger and driver’s side visor.
When you lift the cover, the light will turn on.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position. The window
rises for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch
is released, the express mode is re-activated.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, comes on to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light
flashes once every three seconds.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
Content Theft-Deterrent
If the system is armed and the key is used to unlock the
vehicle, the alarm will be activated.
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
If you do not want to arm the content theft system, lock
the vehicle with the manual lock knob on the doors
or with the inside power door lock switches.
The alarm will sound and the exterior lights will flash if
any door is opened while armed.
Disarming the System
To disarm the system, do one of the following:
• Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.
• Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
Arming the System
With the ignition off, press the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter lock button to arm the system.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stop
flashing.
The system will arm 30 seconds after all the doors are
closed, or 60 seconds any door open.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
time while all the doors are closed, the system will arm
immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds if a
door is open. When the open door is closed, the system
will arm.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
How the System Alarm is Activated
To activate the system if it is armed:
• Open the driver’s door or trunk. A ten second
pre-alarm chirp will sound followed by a
thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Open any other door. A full alarm of horn and lights
will immediately sound for thirty seconds.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Open the hood. If the vehicle has the remote start
feature, it will activate the full alarm.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To turn off the system alarm:
1. This device may not cause interference.
• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
The system will then re-arm itself.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
This will also disarm the system.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This will
also disarm the system.
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If three chirps are heard when the unlock or lock button is
pressed on the RKE transmitter, it means that the content
theft security system alarm was previously triggered.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
page 5-95. If the engine still does not start with the other
key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start,
the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who
can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
It may be possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed to the system.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light on the instrument panel
cluster comes on, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the new key:
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fastor slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Do not exceed
5,000 engine rpm. Avoid downshifting to brake
or slow the vehicle.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is not protected
by the PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or damaged, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position from which
the key can be removed. It also locks the ignition
and transmission. A warning chime sounds if the driver’s
door is opened while the ignition is off and the key is
left in the ignition.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn it to
four different positions.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you
use things like the radio and windshield wipers while
the engine is not running.
R (ON/RUN): This position unlocks the ignition. It is also
the position to where the key returns after you release the
switch and the engine starts. The switch will stay in this
position while the engine is running. But even while the
engine is not running, you can use ON/RUN to operate
the electrical accessories, and to display some
instrument panel warning lights.
In order to shift out of PARK (P), ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake
pedal must be applied.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. You might not be able to start your vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the key.
Use the correct key and turn the key only with your
hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If none of
this works, then your vehicle needs service.
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When
the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
will return to the ON/RUN position for normal driving.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These features continue to work up to 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an
easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the key in
the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime sounds, when
the driver’s door is opened. Always remember to remove
the key from the ignition and take it with you. This locks
your ignition and transmission. Also, always remember
to lock the doors.
The power windows, heated seats, and sunroof will
work until any door is opened.
The radio continues to work until the driver’s door is
opened.
All these features operate when the key is in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
The battery could be drained if the key is left in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You might not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for
an extended period of time.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position – this
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Heated Seats (if equipped)
• Sunroof (if equipped)
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START
for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms
up and lubricates all moving parts.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm
up and lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
position.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The adjustable pedal feature is meant to be used with
the adjustable seat and adjustable steering wheel
controls to reach a safe and comfortable position.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If your vehicle has this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature is
designed for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannot
move farther away from the standard position, but can
move rearward for better pedal reach.
Adjust the throttle and brake pedals by pushing the
right and left arrow to move the pedals either closer
or further.
The ignition must be off or the vehicle in PARK (P) for
this feature to work. The feature will not work if your
foot is pushing on the throttle or brake pedal. Remove
your foot from the pedals and press the switch again.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located
on the left side of the
instrument panel.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
engine coolant heater cord is located near the air
cleaner box on the passenger side of the engine
compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-14 for more information on location.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,
the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you
contact your dealer/retailer in the area where you will
be parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give
you the best advice for that particular area.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt
AC outlet.
{ CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{ CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting
XE Model
XR Model
Your automatic transmission has a shift lever located on
the console between the seats.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to
apply your regular brake first and then press the shift
lever button before you can shift from PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever and then push the shift lever all the
way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then press the shift lever button and move the shift
lever into another gear.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose
control and hit people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine is running at
high speed.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission, see If
page 4-23.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position, available on the
XE model, is also used for normal driving. However, it
reduces vehicle speed without using your brakes for
slight downgrades where the vehicle would otherwise
accelerate due to steepness of grade. If constant
upshifting or downshifting occurs while driving up steep
hills, this position can be used to prevent repetitive types
of shifts. You might choose INTERMEDIATE (I) instead
of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, winding roads and
when towing a trailer, so that there is less shifting
between gears.
• Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to accelerate slowly
or not shift gears when you go faster, and you
continue to drive your vehicle that way, you could
damage the transmission. Have your vehicle serviced
right away. You can drive in LOW (L) when you are
driving less than 35 mph (56 km/h) and DRIVE (D)
for higher speeds until then.
LOW (L): This position, available on the XE model,
gives you even more engine braking but lower fuel
economy than INTERMEDIATE (I). You can use
LOW (L) on hills. It can help control your speed as you
go down steep mountain roads, but then you would
also want to use your brakes off and on. You can use
LOW (L) on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the shift lever is put in LOW (L), the transmission
will not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, See “Skidding” under Loss of
Control on page 4-14.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TAP-shift®
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever from DRIVE (D) rearward to
MANUAL (M).
Notice: If you drive in LOW (L) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h),
you could damage your engine and/or transmission.
Use DRIVE (D) or INTERMEDIATE (I) as much as
possible. Shift into LOW (L) only if your vehicle
is going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h).
While driving in manual mode, the transmission will
remain in the driver selected gear. When coming
to a stop in the manual position, the vehicle
will automatically shift into FIRST (1) gear.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
MANUAL (M): This position, available on the
XR model, allows you to change gears similar to a
manual transmission. If your vehicle has this feature,
see TAP-shift®.
2. Press the (+) plus paddle located on top of the
steering wheel controls forward to upshift, or
push the backside of the shift paddle rearward
to downshift.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) in the instrument
cluster will change from the currently displayed message
to the letter “M”, For MANUAL position, and a number
indicating the requested gear range when moving
the shift lever forward or rearward.
While using the TAP-shift® feature the transmission
will have firmer shifting and sportier performance.
You can use this for sport driving or when climbing
hills to stay in gear longer or to downshift for more
power or engine braking.
SECOND (2) /THIRD (3) Gear
Start Feature
Notice: If you attempt a third gear start while
trailering or towing a heavy load, you will notice
reduced engine power. This could overheat and
damage your transmission. Do not attempt a third
gear start while trailering or towing your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the 6-speed transmission, when
accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy and icy
conditions, you may want to shift into SECOND (2),
or THIRD (3) gear. A higher gear, and light application
of the gas pedal, may allow you to gain more traction
on slippery surfaces.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears
appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine revolutions
per minute (RPM):
• The transmission will not automatically shift to the
next higher gear if the engine RPM is too high.
With the TAP-shift feature, the vehicle can accelerate
from a stop in SECOND (2) or THIRD (3).
• The transmission will not allow shifting to the next
lower gear if the engine RPM is too high.
1. Move the shift lever from DRIVE (D) into the
MANUAL (M) position.
2. With the vehicle stopped, press the plus (+) paddle
forward to select SECOND (2) or THIRD (3) gear.
The vehicle will start from a stop position in
SECOND (2) or THIRD (3) gear.
3. Once the vehicle is moving select the desired
drive gear.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PUSH PARK PEDAL message will also appear
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) to remind you
to release the parking brake. See DIC Warnings
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake,
push down the parking
brake pedal with your left
foot. If the ignition is on, the
brake system warning light
will come on. See Brake
on page 3-36.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill,
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot. Push down momentarily
on the parking brake pedal with your left foot until you feel
the pedal release. If the parking brake is not released
when you begin to drive, the brake system warning light
will be on and a chime will sound warning you that the
parking brake is still on.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Shifting Into Park
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with
the engine running. The vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
the vehicle with the engine running.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-31 for more information.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever
all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked in PARK (P).
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock.
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button
fully released, and
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal
is applied.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push your vehicle a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
information.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
Engine Exhaust
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
{ CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Parking Over Things That Burn
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
{ CAUTION:
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{ CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set the parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P).
{ CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
Also see “If You Are Caught in a Blizzard”
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass and OnStar®. The automatic
dimming feature enables the mirror to sense nighttime
glare from vehicle headlamps from behind and
automatically dim to reduce the glare to a safe level.
The automatic dimming feature turns on each time
the vehicle is started.
Hold the mirror in the center to move it for a clearer
view of behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to avoid
glare from the headlamps behind you. Push the tab
forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
O : This is the on/off button.
While you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or
down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows
you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps
behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use
and pull it for nighttime use.
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom
of the mirror face. See your dealer/retailer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe to
information about the services OnStar® provides.
Press and hold the on/off button until the indicator light
located to the left of the button goes out indicating the
feature is off. To turn the feature back on, press and
hold the on/off button until the indicator light comes on.
There are also OnStar® buttons located at the bottom
of the mirror face. See your retailer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.
about the services OnStar® provides.
Cleaning the Mirror
While cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror housing.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if the vehicle is driven outside zone
eight. Under certain circumstances, such as a long
distance, cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust
the compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on
or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass will show two character boxes for a few
seconds. After a few seconds, the mirror will display
the current compass direction.
Compass Calibration
If after a few seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example), there may
be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna
mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the letter C
appears in the compass window, the compass may
need to be reset or calibrated.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads
a direction.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror
is not adjusted for compass variance, the compass
could give false readings.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears on the display.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Once the zone number appears on the display,
press the on/off button quickly until you reach
the correct zone number. If C appears in the
compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” listed
previously.
Use the selector switch located above the four-way
control panel to choose either the left or right outside
mirror. Then press the control pad to move the selected
mirror in the desired direction.
To maximize the viewing area, adjust each mirror so
you can see the side of your vehicle and the area beside
and behind your vehicle.
Outside Power Mirrors
Heated Outside Mirrors
The controls for the
outside power mirrors are
located on the inside of
the vehicle near the
driver’s side mirror.
If your vehicle has this feature, the surface of the
outside mirrors will heat when the rear window defogger
is activated. See “Rear Window Defogger” under
more information.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
If the vehicle has this feature, the driver side mirror
adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind you.
This feature is controlled by the on and off settings
on the automatic dimming rearview mirror.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar Terms
and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to
speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend
this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions & Connections Plan. For more information,
press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available until
you register with OnStar.
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar
Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStar
service at any time by contacting OnStar. A complete
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or
a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on
eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com
or www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar advisor by
pressing the OnStar button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Virtual Advisor
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving a few
simple voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information (Only available in the continental U.S.).
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless you are in a place where the
wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception when the
service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button for
a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to
activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Location information about your vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
How OnStar Service Works
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an OnStar
Call Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the accident that your vehicle has
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which your
vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual Advisor
feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle
also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we can
provide you with location-based services.
Your Responsibility
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, this
means that your system is not functioning properly and
should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the light
appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment
is active.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Universal Home Remote
System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. Only the original remote control
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming.
The programmed buttons should be erased when
the vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing
Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or gate
that is being programmed.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go
to www.learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as
an additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than
what was used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this button.
After pressing this button, complete the following
steps in less than 30 seconds.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
www.learcar2u.com.
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be used
to control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may need
to be held for up to 20 seconds.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if
the dip switch settings are different, use the dip
switch settings on the motor head unit to program
the Universal Home Remote. The motor head dip
switch settings can also be used when the original
hand held transmitter is not available.
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the
garage door opener motor. If there are a row of dip
switches similar to the graphic above, the garage
door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do not
see a row of dip switches, return to the previous
section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
Your hand held transmitter can have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand
of transmitter.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 now
become the button strokes to be entered into the
Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to
enter the switch settings written down in Step 2,
in order from left to right, into the Universal Home
Remote, when completing Step 4.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected
button should slowly blink. This button may
need to be held for up to 55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device, or home
automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing a different
button in Step 6 than what was used for the garage door
opener.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press
one button on the Universal Home Remote for
each switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Universal Home Remote
Storage Areas
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half
of a second. The indicator light will come on while
the signal is being transmitted.
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Cupholders
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same
time for approximately 20 seconds, until the indicator
lights, located directly above the buttons, begin to
blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
There are two removable cupholders and additional
storage areas located at the rear of the shift lever.
To access, push the button and the cover will slide
back automatically. To close, slide the cover forward
and lock into place.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenience Net
The vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear.
Store small loads as far forward as possible.
The net should not be used to store heavy loads.
Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof,
the switch is located on
the headliner between
the map lamps.
Pull down the door on the back of the center console to
use the rear seat cupholders.
Center Console Storage
The sunroof will only operate while the ignition is in
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or if Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
Your vehicle has a center console with two storage
areas. To access the upper tray storage, lift the
passenger side lever. To access the lower storage
area, lift the driver side lever.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the back of the switch and release it to open the
sunroof to the vent position. From the vent position, press
and release the back of the switch to express-open the
sunroof. To stop the sunroof from express opening, press
the switch again. If the sunshade is closed, it will open
automatically when the sunroof opens past the vented
position.
Sunshade
The automatic sunshade
control is located on
the headliner, between
the map lamp controls.
A deflector will automatically raise when the sunroof
is opened. The deflector will retract when the sunroof
is closed.
To close the sunroof, press the front of the switch and
hold it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if
the switch is released. Close the sunshade by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
the vehicle has an electrical failure.
The sunshade can be independently opened or closed
while the panoramic sunroof is closed. To express-open
or express-close the sunshade, press and release the
control rearward or forward. The sunshade will retract to
the full-open or closed position. To stop the movement of
the sunshade, press the control a second time. To close
the sunshade to a particular position, continue to press
the control and release it when the desired position is
reached.
Notice: If you force the sunshade forward of the
sliding glass panel, damage will occur and the
sunroof may not open or close properly. Always
close the glass panel before closing the sunshade.
The sunshade cannot be opened or closed if the vehicle
has an electrical failure.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
on page 3-6.
M. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
D. Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever. See
O. Climate Control System or Automatic Climate
on page 3-23.
G. Adjustable Pedal Buttons (If Equipped). See
on page 2-26.
Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the police and
others that you have a problem. The front and rear
turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
A tilt and telescope wheel lets you adjust the position of
the steering wheel.
The hazard warning
flasher button is on the
instrument panel.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press again to turn the flashers
completely off.
The hazard warning flashers work even if the key is not
in the ignition switch.
The lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull down
the lever. Then move the steering wheel up or down
or backward or forward into a comfortable position.
Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
Horn
Do not adjust the tilt and telescope lever while driving.
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions let you
signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever returns automatically
to the normal position.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete
your lane change. The lever returns by itself when it
is released.
• 5 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
If the arrows flash rapidly or do not go on at all as you
signal a turn or lane change, a signal bulb could be
burned out and other drivers will not see your turn
signal.
on page 3-13.
Replace burned out bulbs to help avoid an accident.
page 5-95.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever away
from you.
This light comes on in the
instrument panel cluster if
the high beam lamps
are turned on while the
ignition is in ON/RUN.
Use this lever, located on the right side of the steering
wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): Move the
lever to this position for intermittent or speed sensitive
operation. The amount of delay time varies between
wiping cycles due to the delay setting selected or the
speed of the vehicle. As vehicle speed is increased
or decreased, the wiper interval will also increase or
decrease.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice to prevent an overload. If the motor
gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away the snow
or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.
x (Delay): While the lever is in the intermittent
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with this
symbol on it up or down to select a shorter or longer
delay between wiping cycles. To the left of the adjust
band are bars, increasing in size from bottom to top,
that indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smaller bars
mean the wipers movement is less frequent. Larger
bars mean the movement is more frequent.
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for
more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps turn
on automatically. They turn off 15 seconds after
the wipers are turned off.
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the first
setting past intermittent, for steady wiping at low speed.
Windshield Washer
1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to the second
setting past intermittent, for wiping at a high speed.
To wash the windshield, press the button at the end of
the lever until the washers begin.
8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down to this
position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the
windshield wipers start; then let go. The windshield
wipers stop after one wiping cycle. If additional wiping
cycles are needed, hold the lever down longer.
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
Damaged wiper blades can prevent you from seeing
well enough to drive safely. Clear ice and snow from
the wiper blades before using them to prevent damage.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do
become damaged, get new blades.
When the button is released, the washers stop, but the
wipers continue to wipe about three times or resume
the previous speed.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Cruise control lets a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more be maintained without keeping your foot on the
accelerator. This can really help on long trips. Cruise
control does not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
{ CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the steering
wheel.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
I (On/Off): Press to turn the cruise control system
on and off.
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brakes. This disengages
the cruise control. The cruise symbol in the instrument
panel cluster also goes out indicating cruise is no longer
engaged. To return to your previously set speed, you do
not need to go through the set process again. Once at a
speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, briefly press
the RES+.
RES+ (Resume): Press RES+ to resume a set speed
and to accelerate the speed.
SET− (Set): Press SET– to set a speed and to
decrease the speed.
To set a speed do the following:
This takes the vehicle back up to the previously chosen
speed and stays there.
1. Press I to turn cruise control on. The indicator
light on the button comes on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
3. Press the SET− and release it. The cruise symbol
displays in the instrument panel cluster to show the
system is engaged.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
• If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the RES+. Hold it there until the desired
speed is reached and then release the button.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
• To increase the vehicle speed in very small
amounts, briefly press the RES+ and then release
it. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control automatically disengages. See Traction
conditions allow, the cruise control can be used again.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control works on hills depends
upon the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep the vehicle at a lower speed. When
the brakes are applied this ends the cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not use
cruise control on steep hills.
If the cruise control system is already engaged:
• Push and hold the SET− until the desired lower
speed is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly push
the SET−. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to disengage the cruise control:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the previously set cruise control
speed.
• Step lightly on the brake pedal; when cruise control
disengages, the cruise symbol in the instrument
panel cluster goes out.
• Press the I button, to turn off the cruise control
system.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The exterior lamp control has the following
four positions:
Headlamps
2 (Headlamps): Turn the band to this position to turn
on the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the band to this position to
turn on the parking lamps and taillamps only.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Turn the band
to this position to automatically turn on the Daytime
Running Lamps during daytime, and the headlamps,
parking lamps, and taillamps at night.
P (Off/On): Turn the band to this position to turn
on the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada, this
position only works when a vehicle is in the PARK (P)
position.
The band on the lever on the outboard side of the
steering column operates the exterior lamps.
To turn on the Automatic Headlamp System, turn the
switch to off/on. To turn them off, turn the switch to off/on
again. This is a momentary control switch that springs
back when released. The Automatic Headlamp System
always turns on at the beginning of an ignition cycle.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps on Reminder
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL are helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional DRL
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada. The
vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument panel
that controls the DRL. Make sure it is not covered, or
the head lamps will be on when they are not needed.
If you open the driver’s door and turn off the ignition
while leaving the lamps on, you will hear a warning
chime.
Headlamps Off in Park
This feature works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and it is dark outside. To turn the headlamps
off when it is dark outside but keep other exterior lights
on, turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lamp
position.
The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps come
on at a reduced brightness when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
To turn on the headlamps along with the other lamps
when it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamp control to
the AUTO or headlamp position.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The exterior lamps control is in the parking lamps
only position (This applies only to vehicles that
are first sold in Canada).
This function does not work for vehicles first sold in
Canada.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
Delayed Headlamps
• The parking brake is released or the vehicle is not
The delayed headlamps feature keeps the headlamps
on for 20 seconds after the key is turned to LOCK/OFF,
then the headlamps automatically turn off.
in PARK.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lights
are not on unless you turn the exterior lamps control
to the parking lamp position.
To override the 20 second delayed headlamp feature
while it is active turn the turn signal/multifunction
lever up one position and then back to AUTO.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when they are needed.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute
for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if
it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright
position. See “Instrument Panel Brightness Control”
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp
system turns on the headlamps at the normal brightness
along with other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker,
parking lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radio
lights will also be dim.
Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument
panel that controls the automatic headlamp system.
Make sure it is not covered or the automatic headlamp
system will be on when it is not needed.
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
off, turn the ignition on and set the exterior light switch to
the off/on position. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the
transmission must stay in PARK (P) for this function.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the DRL and the automatic
headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or
bright overhead street lights does not affect the system.
The DRL and automatic headlamp systems will only
be affected when the light sensor sees a change
in lighting lasting longer than this delay.
The regular headlamps should be used when needed.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
If your vehicle has fog
lamps, the fog lamp
button is located on the
instrument panel, to the
left of the steering wheel.
The control for this feature
is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to work.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten
or dim the lights.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. An indicator
light in the button will glow when the fog lamps are
on. Push the button again to turn the fog lamps off.
The parking lamps automatically turn on and off when
the fog lamps are turned on and off.
The fog lamps turn off while the high-beam headlamps
are turned on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamp
Parade Dimming
If the vehicle has a dome lamp with a switch, the
following are the settings.
Parade dimming is a separate lighting mode that comes
on while the parking lamps are turned on during the day.
It prevents the display lights and indicator lights from
being dim, while the parking lamps are used during
the day.
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn the
lamp off, even when a door is open.
1 (Door): Move the lever to this position so that the
lamp comes on when a door is opened.
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
The vehicle may have reading lamps on the overhead
console. These lamps come on when the doors are
opened if the lamp switch is not in the OFF position.
Press the side of each lamp to turn them on and
off, while the doors are closed.
+ (On): Move the lever to this position to turn the
dome lamp on.
Entry/Exit Lighting
Overhead Ambient Lighting
The lamps inside the vehicle come on when any door
is opened. These lamps fade out about 20 seconds after
all of the doors have been closed or when the ignition is
turned to ON/RUN. They also come on when the unlock
symbol button or the horn symbol is pressed on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system transmitter.
These lamps will automatically turn on and off as
controlled by the light sensor located on top of the
instrument panel.
Trunk Lamp
The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about
20 seconds after the key is removed from the ignition to
provide light as you exit.
The trunk lamp comes on when the trunk is opened and
turns off when the trunk is closed.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle has a battery run-down feature designed to
protect the vehicle’s battery.
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading lamps, or dome
lamp) is left on when the ignition is turned off, the battery
run-down protection system automatically shuts the lamp
off after 20 minutes. This prevents draining of the battery.
There are two accessory power outlets. One accessory
power outlet is inside the center storage console and
the other is located on the center storage console below
the climate controls.
To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the
following:
To use an outlet, lift the protective cap. When not in
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
The accessory power outlet is operational at all times.
• Open any door.
• Press any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
button.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
• Press the power door lock switch.
• Press the remote trunk release.
• Turn the lamp that was left on to off and then to
on again.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your retailer for additional information
on the accessory power outlet.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling and ventilation for your vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Operation
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed. The fan must be on to run the air-conditioning
compressor.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the air delivery settings, turn the right knob
to select one of the following:
in hot weather. The recirculation indicator light blinks
three times if you try to use recirculation in a mode in
which it cannot function.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument panel
Pressing this button will cancel the outside air mode.
When switching to the defog or defrost modes the system
automatically moves from recirculation to outside air.
When the vehicle or fan is turned off and back on, the
system defaults to outside air automatically. Only use
recirculation mode when it is needed for comfort, since
window fogging can occur.
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to
the instrument panel outlets, and the remaining air
to the floor outlets. Some air will be directed toward
the side windows.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the side window
outlets and windshield.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
When it is cold outside 0°F (−18°C) or lower, use the
engine coolant heater, if vehicle has one, to provide
warmer air faster to the vehicle. An engine coolant heater
warms the coolant the engine uses that provides heat to
warm the inside of the vehicle. For more information, see
: (Outside Air): Press the right side of this button to
turn the outside air mode on. An indicator light comes on
to show that it is activated. Air from outside the vehicle
will circulate throughout the vehicle. The outside air mode
can be used with all modes, but it cannot be used with
the recirculation mode. Press this button to cancel the
recirculation mode.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the air
conditioning system on or off. An indicator light
comes on to show it is activated.
? (Recirculation): Press the left side of the button to
turn the recirculation mode on. An indicator light comes
on to show that it is activated. The air inside the vehicle
will be recirculated through the climate control system
and the vehicle, not from outside the vehicle. This mode
is helpful when trying to limit odors from entering the
vehicle and for maximum air conditioning performance
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while it is idling or after the engine is turned
off is normal.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Air Conditioning
Defogging and Defrosting
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
air conditioning system operate more efficiently.
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to choose from to clear
fog or frost from the windshield. Use the defog mode
to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the C vent mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select # air conditioning.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
- (Defog): This mode divides the air between the
windshield and the floor outlets with a small amount
directed to the side windows. When this mode is
selected, the system automatically turns off recirculation.
The air-conditioning compressor will run unless
the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
The air-conditioning compressor operates although
the indicator light is not on. The air-conditioning
indicator light turns off when defog is selected. If the
air-conditioning button is pressed while in defog mode,
the indicator light will turn on. If the button is pressed
again, the light will turn off. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in the defog mode. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
4. Select the ? recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
can cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry.
To prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle
has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to
the windshield with some air directed to the floor vents.
In this mode, the system automatically forces outside air
into the vehicle. The air-conditioning compressor will
not run unless the outside temperature is at or below
freezing. The air-conditioning compressor operates
although the indicator light is not on. The air-conditioning
indicator light turns off when defrost is selected. If the
air-conditioning button is pressed while in defrost mode,
the indicator light turns on. If the button is pressed again,
the light turns off. Recirculation cannot be selected while
in the defrost mode.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
< REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light comes on to show
that the rear window defogger is activated. Be sure
to clear as much snow from the rear window as possible.
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is
pressed. If turned on again, the defogger only runs
for about seven minutes before turning off. The defogger
can also be turned off by pressing the button again or
by turning off the engine.
To help clear the windshield quickly, do the following:
1. Select the defrost mode.
2. Select the highest temperature.
3. Select the highest fan speed.
If your vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on once
the button is pressed.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the surface
of the outside mirrors heat when the rear window
page 2-38.
Automatic Climate Control System
If your vehicle has this system, the heating, cooling, and
ventilation can be automatically controlled.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach
a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.
Remote Start Climate Control Operation
If your vehicle has the remote start feature and it is
activated, the climate control system heats or cools the
inside of the vehicle using the modes that were set before
the vehicle was turned off. The climate control knobs will
remain active during a remote start. However, the climate
control buttons will be inactive until the ignition is turned
on by the key. If the fan is off, the climate control system
will not operate during remote start. See Remote Keyless
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fan
speed control and the air delivery mode control knobs
to activate the automatic system. When automatic
operation is active the system controls the inside
temperature and air delivery.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
remains at the maximum cooling setting. If the
temperature is set at 90°F (32°C) the system
remains at the maximum heat setting. Choosing
either maximum setting does not cause the vehicle
to heat or cool any faster.
1. Turn the fan knob and the mode knob to the AUTO
position.
The current set temperature displays. When AUTO
is selected, the air conditioning operation and air
inlet is automatically controlled. The air conditioning
compressor runs while the outside temperature is
over about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally
be set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet
may automatically switch to recirculate inside air
to help quickly cool down the vehicle.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel near the windshield.
This sensor regulates air temperature based on
the intensity of the sun.
Also do not cover the sensor grille on the lower
right side of the climate control faceplate, as
this regulates the inside temperature.
To avoid blowing cold air at engine start-up in cold
weather, the system delays turning on the fan until
warm air is available. The length of delay depends
on the engine coolant temperature. Turning the fan
knob overrides this delay and changes the fan to the
selected speed.
2. Set the temperature.
An initial setting of 73°F (23°C) is recommended.
Allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate.
Press the up or down arrow temperature buttons
to adjust the temperature setting as necessary.
If the temperature is set at 60°F (15°C) the system
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
: (Outside Air): Press the right side of this button to
turn the outside air mode on. An indicator light comes on
to show it is activated. Air from outside the vehicle will
circulate throughout the vehicle. The outside air mode
can be used with all modes, but it cannot be used with
the recirculation mode. Pressing this button cancels the
recirculation mode.
The air delivery mode or fan speed can be manually
adjusted.
9 (Off): Select this position on the fan knob to turn off
the entire climate control system. Outside air still enters
the vehicle. The direction can be changed by changing
the mode position. The temperature can also be adjusted
using either the up or down arrow temperature buttons.
? (Recirculation): Press the left side of the button to
turn the recirculation mode on. An indicator light above
the button comes on to show it is activated. The air inside
the vehicle recirculates through the climate control
system and the vehicle, not from outside the vehicle.
This mode is helpful when trying to limit odors from
entering the vehicle and for maximum air conditioning
performance in hot weather. The recirculation indicator
light blinks three times if you try to use recirculation in
a mode in which it cannot function.
9 (Fan): Turn the knob with the fan symbol to
manually adjust the fan speed.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode divides the air between the
instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets.
Pressing this button cancels the auto recirculation
feature. Each time the vehicle is started, the system
reverts to the auto recirculation function.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the side window
outlets.
If recirculation is selected while in defrost, defog or floor
mode, the light on the button flashes three times and then
goes out to indicate that this is not allowed. This is to
prevent window fogging.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the system
in recirculation for extended periods of time can cause
fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, select
either defog or defrost. Make sure the air conditioning is
on. Allow the air conditioning to run automatically to help
dehumidify the air.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation
of the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm air
to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
To warm or cool the air delivered, press the temperature
buttons to the desired setting.
In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifies
the air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, the
system maximizes its performance by using recirculation
as necessary.
Temperature Control: Press the up and down arrows
to increase or decrease the temperature inside the
vehicle.
Heating: On cold days when using manual operation of
the automatic system, use floor mode to deliver air to
the floor outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, push
the temperature buttons to the desired setting.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air conditioning compressor on and off. A light above
the button comes on while the air conditioning is on.
When air conditioning is selected or is in AUTO mode,
the system runs the air conditioning automatically to
cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.
To use the automatic mode, turn the knob to AUTO
and adjust the temperature by pressing the temperature
buttons.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for
the vehicle to cool down. Then keep the windows
closed for the air conditioner to work its best.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to choose from to clear
fog or frost from the windshield.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light above the button
comes on to show that the rear window defogger is
activated.
- (Defog): Use the defog mode to clear the windows
of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. This
setting delivers air to the floor and windshield outlets.
If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window
defogger turns off about 15 minutes after the button is
pressed. If additional warming time is needed, press the
button again.
0 (Defrost): Use the defrost mode to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly. The system
automatically controls the fan speed if defrost is selected
from the AUTO mode. If the outside temperature is
40°F (4°C) or warmer, the air conditioning compressor
automatically runs to help dehumidify the air and dry the
windshield. The air conditioning indicator light blinks three
times if the compressor is turned off while in this mode.
If the vehicle’s speed is maintained above 50 mph
(80 km/h), the rear window defogger remains on once
the button is pressed.
If the vehicle has heated outside mirrors, the surface of
the outside mirrors will also heat when the rear window
page 2-38.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Start Climate Control Operation
Rear Seat Air Outlet
If the vehicle has remote start and it is activated, the
climate control system heats and cools the inside of the
vehicle using the previous system settings before the
vehicle was turned off. The climate control knobs will
remain active during a remote start. However, the climate
control buttons will be inactive until the ignition is turned
on by the key. If the fan is off, the climate control system
will not operate during remote start.
For vehicles with this feature, the rear seat air outlet is
located in the center of the instrument panel above
the two main center outlets.
Use the thumbwheel in the center of the outlet to turn
the airflow on or off. The horizontal vent vane does
not move.
Operation Tips
With the automatic climate control system, the climate
control displays “RS” in place of the temperature to
indicate that remote start is activated. For best
performance, turn both the fan and mode knobs to
AUTO. If the temperature is cold enough and the mode
knob is set to AUTO, the system begins in defrost to
clear the windows. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that can
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
• Do not use non-GM approved hood deflectors as
they could adversely affect the performance of
the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
Outlet Adjustment
• When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle is
encountered, use the recirculation mode, with the
temperature knob at a comfortable setting to prevent
the odor from entering the vehicle through the
ventilation system. This can be helpful when driving
through a long tunnel with poor ventilation. However,
extended usage of this mode in cold or cool weather
can cause window fogging.
There are four main air outlets on the instrument panel.
Use the lever located in the center of each outlet by
moving it either side-to-side or up and down, to change
the direction and amount of airflow in the vehicle. The
center thumbwheel does not control the main outlets.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let
you know they are working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Gages can indicate when there could be or there is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let you
know when there is a problem with your vehicle.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your
warning lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays
on when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
that tells you what to do about it. Follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and
even dangerous. Get to know your warning lights
and gages. They are a big help.
Warning lights come on when there could be or there is
a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some warning
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will need to drive safely and
economically.
Your vehicle has this instrument panel cluster, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained
on the following pages.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in miles
per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). See DIC
information.
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Safety Belt Reminders
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime comes on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.
The digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone
tries to turn it back.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if it
can’t, then it is set at zero and a label must be put on the
driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when the
new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
The trip odometer can tell you how far you have driven
since you last reset it.
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger
to buckle their safety belt. This would only occur if the
passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger Sensing
passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, will come on and stay on for several seconds and
then flash for several more.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light indicates if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor,
the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring and
the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system, see Airbag System
on page 1-56.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This light comes on when
the vehicle is started, and
flashes for a few seconds.
The light should go out
when the system is ready.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is
started or comes on while driving, the airbag system may
not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{ CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in the
vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they could
even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a
few seconds when the engine is started. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed immediately.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also come
more information.
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, for several seconds as a system check. If you use
remote start to start your vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will light
either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you
know the status of the right front passenger’s frontal and
seat-mounted side impact airbags.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
{ CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is
or airbags are off.
{ CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not turned
off the passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
on this, including important safety information.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned, but the engine has
not started to run, as a
check to show you it
is working.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-32 for more on this, including
important safety information.
It should go out once the engine starts. If it stays on,
or comes on while driving, there could be a problem with
the charging system. A charging system message in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) may also appear.
more information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If you
must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain
to turn off all the accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) may display a
BRAKE FLUID message. See DIC Warnings and
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. Try turning off and restarting
the vehicle one or two times, if the light is still on, have
the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-30.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
{ CAUTION:
The brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can
lead to an accident. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off the road and
carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for
service.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator/Warning Light
This light will come on
briefly when you start
the engine.
This light is located in the
center of the instrument
panel cluster.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
For vehicles that have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system or the Traction Control System (TCS),
this indicator/warning light should come on briefly when
the engine is started.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you
do not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes.
If the indicator/warning light does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem. This light, along with the appropriate Driver
Information Center (DIC) messages, indicates when the
ESC system and the TCS are working or are disabled.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
all brake related DIC messages.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this light is on and not flashing, the TCS and
potentially the ESC system have been disabled. Check
your DIC messaging to determine which feature(s) is
no longer functioning and whether it is because of the
driver turning off the feature(s), or the system may not be
working properly and your vehicle requires service. If the
TCS is disabled, wheel spin will not be limited. If the ESC
system is disabled, the system will not aid in maintaining
vehicle directional control. In either case, adjust your
driving accordingly.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the TCS
or the ESC system is actively working. Check the DIC
messaging for details to determine which system is
working. If the LOW TRACTION message appears,
the system is limiting wheel spin. If the ESC ACTIVE
message appears, the system is aiding in maintaining
vehicle directional control.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-30 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive with the
engine coolant temperature warning light on.
information.
more information on the messages associated with
this light.
This light will also come on briefly when starting your
vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
United States
Canada
This light also comes on when one or more of the tires
are significantly underinflated.
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, the light comes
on and you hear a chime, your engine is too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC
information.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions and the gage reads hot, you should pull
off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to
do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System, this light flashes for approximately 60 seconds
and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition
for more information.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by your warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories and
This light comes on briefly,
as a check to show it is
working, when the ignition
is turned to ON/RUN. If the
light does not come on,
see your dealer/retailer.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
If the check engine light comes on to indicate that there
is an OBD II problem and service is required.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage
the emission control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Heeding the light can prevent
more serious damage to your vehicle. This system
assists your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following can prevent more serious damage to the
vehicle:
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed and may cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on
acceleration. These conditions might go away once
the engine is warmed up.
• If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank
of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches
fire. You or others could be burned. Check the
oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle
serviced.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if the battery has recently been replaced or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control
systems during normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving. If this has been
done and the vehicle still does not pass the
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started
as a check to make
sure it works. If it does not,
the vehicle needs service.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever the cruise
control is set.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
is not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other system
problem.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
Security Light
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-17.
for more information.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
These are normal and do not indicate a problem with
your fuel gage:
Fuel Gage
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took
a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill the tank.
• The indicator moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
United States
Canada
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have
left, when the ignition is on. When the indicator nears
empty, a LOW FUEL message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
have a little fuel left, but you should get more soon.
The arrow on the fuel gage points to side of the vehicle
with the fuel door.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for one second, then release the buttons
to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display
driver personalization menu modes and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in the
following.
The DIC buttons are
located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
Information Modes
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer display. This mode shows
the temperature outside of the vehicle in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) and the total
distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). The outside air temperature appears
on the left side of the DIC display and the odometer
appears on the right side of the display.
INFO (Information): Press this button to scroll through
the vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization
menu mode setting, or acknowledge a warning
message.
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
page 3-52.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRIP A or TRIP B
MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)
Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B
display. These modes show the current distance
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers
can be used at the same time.
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) AVG
displays. This mode shows how many miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
your vehicle is getting based on current and past
driving conditions.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold
the reset button for a few seconds while the desired
trip odometer is displayed.
To reset the average fuel economy, press and hold the
reset button while MPG (L/100 KM) AVG is displayed.
Average fuel economy is then calculated starting
from that point. If the average fuel economy is not
reset, it is continually updated each time you drive.
FUEL RANGE
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the remaining distance
you can drive without refueling in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank.
MPG (L/100 KM) INST (Instantaneous)
Press the information button until MPG (L/100 KM) INST
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy
at a particular moment and changes frequently as
driving conditions change. This mode shows the
instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg)
or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average
fuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.
When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOW displays.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually
updated. The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
button until LF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays for the
front tires. Press the information button again until
LR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays for the rear tires.
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until AV SPEED displays.
This mode shows the vehicle’s average speed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the system
while driving, a message advising you to check the tire
pressure appears in the display. See Inflation - Tire
on page 3-47 for more information.
To reset the average vehicle speed, press and hold the
reset button while AV SPEED is displayed.
OIL LIFE
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. It shows 100% when the system is
reset after an oil change. It alerts you to change the oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of your vehicle’s systems.
A message clears when the vehicle’s condition is no
longer present. To acknowledge a message and clear it
from the display, press and hold any of the DIC buttons.
If the condition is still present, the warning message
comes back on the next time the vehicle is turned off and
back on. With most messages, a warning chime sounds
when the message displays. Your vehicle may have other
warning messages.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System”
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
Tire Pressure
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch. See
information.
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure is shown in either pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the information
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
CHECK TIRE PRESS (Pressure)
This message displays if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.
for more information.
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as
you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to
those shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See
shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation and
tire pressure warning light comes on. See Tire Pressure
BRAKE FLUID
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.
more information. Have the brake system serviced
by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
CRUISE ENGAGED
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message displays when the cruise control system
information.
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
has expired and it should be changed.
When this message is acknowledged and cleared from
the display, the engine oil life system must still be reset
information.
DOOR AJAR
This message displays if one or more of the vehicle’s
doors are not closed properly. Make sure that the
door(s) are closed completely.
ENGINE DISABLED
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays if the starting of the engine
is disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to make sure that it
is on properly. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the message off.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays
on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on solid when ESC is
turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic
information.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ACTIVE
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when ESC is assisting
you with directional control of the vehicle. You may feel or
hear the system working and see this message displayed
in the DIC. Slippery road conditions may exist when this
message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
This message may stay on for a few seconds after ESC
stops assisting you with directional control of the vehicle.
This is normal when the system is operating. See
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-37
for more information.
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message displays if the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery
in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement” under
on page 2-4.
LOW FUEL
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
page 5-8 for more information.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOW TRACTION
SERVICE AIR BAG
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on the
instrument panel cluster flashes when the system is
actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may
exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. This message stays on for a few seconds
after the system stops limiting wheel spin. See Traction
information.
This message displays when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONIC STABILITY
CONTROL)
If your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
this message displays and a chime sounds if there has
been a problem detected with ESC. The ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light
stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Electronic
information.
LOW WASHER FLUID
This message displays when the vehicle’s windshield
washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid
reservoir to the proper level as soon as possible.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try
resetting the system by turning the ignition off and then
back on. If this message still stays on or turns back on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the ESC inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible.
POWER STEERING
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays if
a problem has been detected with the electric power
steering. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
PUSH PARK PEDAL
This message displays if the parking brake is left
information.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE TRACTION
TRACTION OFF
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and a chime sounds when the
system is not functioning properly. The ESC/TCS light
also appears on the instrument panel cluster. This light
stays on solid as long as the detected problem remains
present. When this message displays, the system is not
working. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),
this message displays and the ESC/TCS light on
the instrument panel cluster comes on solid when the
system is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 3-37
for more information.
TRUNK AJAR
information. Have the system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
information.
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-39. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-61 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Personalization Menu Modes
OIL LIFE RESET
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the features available will be
displayed on the DIC.
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine
oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine Oil Life
information.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed
from their default state since that time.
UNITS
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least one second
to scroll through the available settings:
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information
will be displayed in English units.
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
the same time for one second, then release to enter
the personalization menu.
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
Press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings for each mode.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the lock
button on the RKE transmitter.
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows
remote start to be turned off or on. Remote start allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle
using your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
When REMOTE START appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to
scroll through the available settings:
page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
UNLOCK HORN
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on
the first press of the unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, can be enabled or disabled.
When UNLOCK HORN appears on the display, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second to scroll
through the available settings:
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
LOCK HORN
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp
every time the lock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or
disabled. When LOCK HORN appears on the display,
press and hold the reset button for at least one second
to scroll through the available settings:
page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting
is displayed on the DIC.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The horn
will still chirp on the second press.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHT FLASH
DELAY LOCK
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
hazard/turn signal lighting to flash every time the lock,
unlock, or trunk release buttons on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter are pressed, can be enabled
or disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on the
display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY
LOCK appears on the display, press and hold the
reset button for at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power lock switch or
the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter a second time.
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will
not flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
will flash when the lock, unlock, or trunk release buttons
on the RKE transmitter are pressed.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter.
page 2-4 for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
UNLK (Unlock)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press and hold
the reset button for at least one second to scroll through
the available settings:
This screen displays only if DRIVER or ALL is selected
for the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press and hold the reset
button for at least one second to scroll through the
available settings:
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
turned off.
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
You will need to manually unlock the doors.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
for more information.
for more information.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
LANGUAGE
This feature, which allows the vehicle’s exterior
perimeter lighting to turn on each time the unlock button
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When EXT LIGHTS
appears on the display, press and hold the reset button
for at least one second to scroll through the available
settings:
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. When LANGUAGE appears on
the display, press and hold the reset button for at least
one second to scroll through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
FRENCH: All messages will appear in French.
SPANISH: All messages will appear in Spanish.
GERMAN: All messages will appear in German.
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on
when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn
on when the unlock button on the RKE transmitter
is pressed.
To select a setting and exit out of the personalization
menu mode, press the information button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
page 2-4 for more information.
Exiting Personalization Menu
To select a setting and move on to the next feature,
press the information button while the desired setting is
displayed on the DIC.
The personalization menu will be exited when any of the
following conditions occur:
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While your vehicle is parked:
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{ CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment
can be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the
radio has a MENU button instead of the clock button
to set the time and date.
Setting the Clock
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD player, the
radio has a H button for setting the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow the instructions:
1. Turn the radio on.
To set the time and date, follow the instructions:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press the MENU button until the H tab display
appears.
2. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under that tab.
The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of
the tabs that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date
if selected, increases by one.
4. Press the pushbutton located under any one of
the tabs that you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if
selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right ¨SEEK arrow
or \ FWD button.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right ¨SEEK arrow
or \ FWD button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
• To decrease the time or date, press the
left ©SEEK arrow or s REV button, or turn
left ©SEEK arrow or s REV button, or turn
the tune knob, located on the upper right side of
the radio.
the f knob, located on the upper right side of
the radio.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
The date does not automatically display. To see the
date press the H button while the radio is on. The date
with display times out after a few seconds and goes
back to the normal radio and time display.
date press the H button while the radio is on. The date
with display times out after a few seconds and goes
back to the normal radio and time display.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
instructions:
Radio(s) (MP3)
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow tab. Once the time
12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month,
day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and
year) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
3. Press the clock or MENU button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD similar
Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Playing the Radio
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies
upon receiving specific information from these stations
and only works when the information is available.
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the
station name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station can broadcast incorrect information that causes
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio has
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). While SCV is on,
the radio volume automatically adjusts to compensate for
road and wind noise as driving speed changes. That way,
the volume level should sound about the same as you
drive. To activate SCV:
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ Radio
Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM tab
on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button,
and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has this
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM, or
XM™ (if equipped). The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
©SEEK ¨: Press the SEEK arrows to go to the
previous or to the next station and stay there.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency tabs and
by using the radio favorites page button. Press the FAV
button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page. Each page
of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or
XM™ (if equipped) stations. To store a station as a
favorite, perform the following steps:
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow
for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes
to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to
the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to
stop scanning.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press this button to display
additional text information related to the current FM-RDS
or XM™ station, or MP3 song. A choice of additional
information such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT can
appear. Continue pressing this button to highlight the
desired tab, or press the pushbutton positioned under
any one of the tabs and the information about that tab
displays.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.
While information is not available, No Info displays.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob
until the tone control tabs display. Continue pressing
to highlight the desired tab, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired tab. Turn the tune knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by
pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD or s REV button
until the desired levels are obtained. If a station’s
frequency is weak, or has static, decrease the treble.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,
to return to the original main radio screen showing
the radio station frequency tabs and to begin
the process of programming your favorites for
the chosen amount of numbered pages.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select preset
equalization settings.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™
stations while the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find
XM™ channels within a desired category, perform
the following:
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ button until
Manual displays or start to manually adjust the bass,
midrange, or treble by pressing the f knob.
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category tabs. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade,
press the f knob until the speaker control tabs display.
Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab, or press
the pushbutton positioned under the desired tab. Turn
the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
highlighted setting. The highlighted setting can also
be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM™
station associated with that category.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press the SEEK arrows
to go to the previous or to the next XM™ station
within the selected category.
or s REV button until the desired levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE
tab for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the
level adjusts to the middle position.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display your favorites
again.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following:
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly and your vehicle must be returned
to your dealer/retailer for service.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT tab.
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
3. Turn the f knob to display the category you want
removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
tab until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
section for further detail.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add tab when a removed category
displays or by pressing the pushbutton under the
Restore All tab.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^ : Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
Care of Your CDs
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the ^ button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s)
in their original cases or other protective cases and away
from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the
bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage
the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
3. Press this button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. While the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold
the Z EJECT button for two seconds to eject all discs.
Care of Your CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD
currently playing.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have
played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next
track. If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple
times, the player continues moving backward or
forward through the tracks on the CD.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD
player and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard
at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume
playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button
to advance playback quickly within a track. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track
displays.
Z EJECT: Press this button to eject CD(s). To eject
the CD that is currently playing, press and release this
button. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once
the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD can be
removed. If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD automatically pulls back into the player and
begins playing.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks
can be listened to in random, rather than sequential
order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player.
To use random, do one of the following:
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio while a
CD is playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
while listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD
is in the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, No Input Device Found displays.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD
player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the
CD player. A RDM tab displays.
To play the tracks from the single CD in random
order, press the pushbutton positioned under
the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays.
Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
If your radio system has a single CD (MP3) player or
a six-disc CD (MP3) player, it is capable of playing
an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on
how to play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, see Using
player, press and hold the LOAD ^ button. A beep
sounds and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or
more discs partway into the slot of the CD player.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM tab until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio
output; do not plug the headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. However, an external audio device
such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
changer, or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected
to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for
audio listening.
CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or the CD
ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns
to normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume
of the portable player. Additional volume adjustments
might be needed from the portable device if the volume
is not loud or soft enough.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer while reporting the problem.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio while
a portable audio device is playing. The portable audio
device continues playing, so you might want to stop it
or turn it off.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
while a portable audio device is playing. Press this button
again and the system begins playing audio from the
connected portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, No Input Device Found displays.
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
Using an MP3
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album
are available for display by the radio when recorded
using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total number
of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the
complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files.
By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio
and ignore the MP3 files. Pressing the CAT button
toggles between compressed and uncompressed
audio format.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions might not work).
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders, or
playlists can cause the player to be unable to play up
to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists, or
sessions. If you wish to play a large number of files,
folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize the length of
the file, folder, or playlist name. Long names also
take up more space on
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
the display, potentially getting cut off.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and
no compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not
to function in the player.
Playlists can be changed by using the previous and
next folder buttons, the f knob, or the SEEK arrows.
An MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded using no
file folders can also be played. If a CD-R or CD-RW
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you access
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum are not accessible.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions do not display on a CD that was recorded
without folders or playlists. When displaying the name of
the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio
displays ROOT.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CD Player),
or press the load button and wait for the message to
insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side up. The player
pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When either
are turned back on, the CD-R starts to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless you have
chosen the folder mode as the default display. The new
track name displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
File System and Naming
Z EJECT: Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be
removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically
pulls back into the player and begins playing.
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject
button for two seconds to eject all discs.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than 10 seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files
on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or
all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do
one of the following:
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc
displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder tab to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder tab to go to the first track in the
next folder.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc
CD player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM tab until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By tab. From
the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the album
button. Press the pushbutton below the back tab to return
to the main music navigator screen. Now the album name
is displayed on the second line between the arrows and
songs from the current album begins to play. Once all
songs from that album are played, the player moves to
the next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R or
CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below
the music navigator tab. The player scans the disc to sort
the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It can
take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the
number of MP3 files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
or CD-RW begins playing again.
To exit the music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to playing
MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist playing is
shown on the second line of the display between the
arrows. Once all songs by that artist are played, the
player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on
the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files by that
artist. To listen to MP3 files by another artist, press the
pushbutton located below either arrow button. The CD
goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.
Continue pressing either button until the desired artist
displays.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio while a
CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
while listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays while a CD is
in the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, No Input Device Found displays.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
XM TheftLocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle. For
security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped
between vehicles. If this message appears after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly,
but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the
XM™ signal. When you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune to another channel.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the presets, choose another
station for that preset button.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The audio system mutes the rear speakers when the
RSA audio is active through the headphones.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Your vehicle may have rear seat audio (RSA).
Audio can be heard through wired headphones
(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.
If your vehicle has this feature, audio can also be
heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to
and control any of the music sources: radio, CDs, or other
auxiliary sources. However, the rear seat passengers can
only control the music sources the front seat passengers
are not listening to. For example, rear seat passengers
can control and listen to a CD through the headphones,
while the driver listens to the radio through the front
speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of
the volume for each set of headphones.
To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through
the RSA, attach the iPod or portable audio device to the
front auxiliary input (if available), located on the front
audio system. Turn the iPod on, then choose the
front auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE button.
The area above the top row of buttons on the RSA
faceplate is not a display. Infrared transmitters are
located in this area for the wireless headphones.
You can operate the RSA functions even when the
main radio is off. The front audio system will display
the headphone icon when the RSA is on, and will
disappear from the display when it is off.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1–6 (Preset): Press this button to go to the next preset
radio station. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
While a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, press
this button to select the next CD, if multiple CDs are
loaded. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to a CD.
© ¨(Seek): While listening to the radio, press the
seek arrows to go to the next or the previous station
and stay there. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
The following functions are controlled by the RSA system:
n (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume. The left knob controls the left
wired headphones and the right knob controls the right
wired headphones.
While a CD is playing, press the left seek arrow to go to
the start of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. Press the right seek arrow to go to the
next track on the CD. This function is inactive if the
front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the system on or
off. The rear speakers are muted when the RSA power is
turned on.
Rear Seat Audio Controls
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the CD, and if your vehicle has these features, DVD, front
auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
The following function is controlled by the main radio:
Front seat passengers can turn the RSA off by
quickly pressing the front radio power knob twice.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The headphones automatically turn off after four hours
of continuous use.
Headphones
The RSA includes two wireless headphones that are
dedicated to this system. These headphones are used
to listen to media such as CDs or radio. The wireless
headphones have an On/Off button and a volume
control.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
For optimal audio performance, the headphones must
be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left) appears on
the upper left side, above the ear pad and should be
positioned on the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears
on the upper right side, above the ear pad and should
be positioned on the right ear.
Push the power button to turn on the headphones.
An indicator light located on the headphones comes
on. If the light does not come on, the batteries
might need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement”
later in this section for more information. Switch the
headphones to Off when not in use.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
Infrared transmitters are located on the rear seat audio
faceplate above the top row of buttons. This area is not
a display. The headphones shut off automatically to
save the battery power if the RSA shuts off or if the
headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more
than three minutes. If you move too far forward or step
out of the vehicle, the headphones lose the audio signal.
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. Contact your
dealer/retailer for more information.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
To change the batteries on the headphones, do the
following:
Radio controls are located
on the right side of the
steering wheel. If your
vehicle has this feature,
some audio controls can
be adjusted at this location.
They include the following:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the
diagram on the inside of the battery compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the
door screw.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
e + e − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to
increase or to decrease the volume.
w x (Previous/Next): Press the arrows to go to the
previous or to the next stored radio station and stay there.
Press and hold the arrows briefly to advance to the
previous or to the next station with a strong signal in
the selected band.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOC, LOCK, or LOCKED could display.
When a CD is playing, press the arrows to go to the
previous or to the next track. Press and hold the arrows
briefly to continue reversing back or advancing ahead to
other tracks within the disc.
With THEFTLOCK activated, the radio does not operate
if stolen.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g (Mute/Voice Activation): Press this button to
silence the system. Press this button again to turn
the sound on. If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and
hold this button for two seconds to activate voice on
page 2-39 in this manual for more information.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio Reception
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or through tunnels could
cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time. The radio
may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backglass Antenna
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged.
If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere
with radio reception.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice
build up for clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear window
antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not clear
the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Loading items onto the roof of the vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM system. Make sure
the XM Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Chime Level Adjustment
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.
To change the volume level of the chime, press and hold
pushbutton 6 or the sixth FAV pushbutton with the ignition
on and the radio power off. The volume level will change
from the normal level to loud, and Loud will appear on
the radio display. To change back to the normal setting,
press and hold pushbutton 6 or the sixth FAV pushbutton
again. The volume level will change from the loud level
to normal, and Normal will appear on the radio display.
Removing the radio and not replacing it with a factory
radio or chime module will disable vehicle chimes.
If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger grid
line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line must
be repaired.
If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, and the
antenna needs to be attached to the glass, make sure
that the grid lines for the AM-FM antenna are not
damaged. There is enough space between the grid lines
to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering
with radio reception.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a driver who will not
drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
{ CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have
been associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is higher
than if the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and
you might even notice that the brake pedal moves
a little. This is normal.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock Brake
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that the front wheels are spinning too much or are
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the front brakes and reduces engine power
by closing the throttle and managing engine spark to limit
wheel spin.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might
hear the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
This light will flash when
your traction control system
is limiting wheel spin.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
When this light is on solid
and either the SERVICE
TRACTION or TRACTION
OFF message is displayed,
the system will not limit
wheel spin.
To turn the system off or
on, press and release this
button located on the
instrument panel.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC Warnings and
The Traction Control System is automatically enabled
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system enabled. You can turn TCS
off if you ever need to.
The DIC will display the appropriate message as
described previously when you press the button.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, it is
possible to lose traction. If you attempt to shift with
the front wheels spinning with a loss of traction,
it is possible to cause damage to the transmission.
Do not attempt to shift when the front wheels do
not have traction. Damage caused by misuse of the
vehicle is not covered. See your warranty book
for additional information.
Traction Control Operation
Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine
power to the wheels (engine speed management)
and by applying brakes to each individual wheel
(brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle, and it will activate and flash
the ESC/TCS light and display the LOW TRACTION
message if it senses either of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving.
For more information on the LOW TRACTION message,
The traction control system may activate on dry or rough
roads or under conditions such as heavy acceleration
while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the
transmission. When this happens, you may notice a
reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise or
vibration. This is normal.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to
spin excessively while the ESC/TCS, ABS and Brake
warning lights and the SERVICE ESC and/or
SERVICE TRACTION messages are displayed, you
could damage the differential. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Reduce engine power
and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively while these
lights and this message are displayed.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise control again, you
may re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-10.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster
when the ESC system
is both on and activated.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Your vehicle may have an Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system which combines antilock brake, traction
and stability control systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most
driving conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
ensure there are no problems. You may hear or feel the
system working. This is normal and does not mean there
is a problem with your vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
You may also feel or hear the system working; this is
normal.
When the light is on solid and either the SERVICE ESC
or ESC OFF message is displayed, the system will
not assist the driver in maintaining directional control of
the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. See DIC
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the ESC/TCS
light will be on solid, and the ESC OFF or SERVICE
ESC message will be displayed.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is
automatically enabled whenever you start your vehicle.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always
leave the system on. But, you can turn ESC off if you
ever need to.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is in cruise control when the system begins
to assist the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle, the ESC/TCS light will flash and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
page 3-10.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle
to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is
The ESC/TCS button is
located on the center
console.
ESC may also turn off automatically if it determines that
a problem exists with the system. The ESC OFF and
SERVICE ESC messages and the ESC/TCS light will
be on solid to warn the driver that ESC is disabled and
requires service. If the problem does not clear after
restarting the vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailer
page 3-47 for more information.
The traction control system can be turned off or back on
by pressing the ESC/TCS button. To disable both traction
control and ESC, press and hold the button briefly.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
When the ESC system is turned off, the TRACTION
OFF and ESC OFF messages will appear, and
the ESC/TCS light will be on solid to warn the driver
that both traction control and ESC are disabled.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydraulic Power Steering
Steering
If your vehicle has the hydraulic power steering
system and you lose power steering assist because
the engine stops or the power steering system is
not functioning, you can steer, but it will take much
more effort.
Electric Power Steering
If your vehicle has the electric power steering system
and the engine stalls while you are driving, the power
steering assist system will continue to operate until you
are able to stop your vehicle. If you lose power steering
assist because the electric power steering system is not
functioning, you can steer, but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you
may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist.
The normal amount of power steering assist should return
shortly after a few normal steering movements.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you have
ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems and/or the POWER STEERING message is
displayed in the Driver Information Center, contact your
dealer/retailer for service repairs. See DIC Warnings
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and your speed. While in a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of
those places. You can lose control. See Traction
If you need to reduce speed when approaching a curve,
do it before you enter the curve, while the front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the
time for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Your vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
{ CAUTION:
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
on page 5-51.
• Turn off cruise control, if equipped.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
Hill and Mountain Roads
up-to-date maps?
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{ CAUTION:
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
{ CAUTION:
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and the
vehicle in gear when going downhill.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple
of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), it will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. But you can turn the TCS off if you ever
need to. You should turn the TCS off if your vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If Your Vehicle
you have TCS, slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. Under certain conditions, you might want
to turn the TCS off, such as when driving through deep
snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at
page 4-9.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things
to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you
are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you
have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around yourself
or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
{ CAUTION:
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or
stability system. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-9. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
could free your vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle
out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If your
vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing Your
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Vehicle Certification label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on the vehicle can break, and it can
change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of the vehicle.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label lists the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also lists
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation, see
page 5-58.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
1,000 lbs
1,000 lbs
A
A
(453 kg)
(453 kg)
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
seating positions. The combined weight of the
driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Maximum Vehicle
Capacity Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs (91
kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
A vehicle specific Certification label is found on
the rear edge of the driver’s door.
0 lbs (0 kg)
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and tongue
weight if pulling a trailer.
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about your
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight and
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either
the front or rear axle.
{ CAUTION:
Things you put inside the vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
{ CAUTION:
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as
you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on the vehicle can break, and it can
change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of the vehicle.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in the vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If things like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else are put inside the vehicle, they will
go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
To avoid vehicle damage, a platform or flatbed trailer
should be used to transport this vehicle. Consult
your dealer/retailer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Does the vehicle have the proper towing
equipment? See your dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle
with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up
on a device known as a dolly.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Set the parking brake.
Dinghy Towing
4. To prevent the battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, remove the following
fuse from the instrument panel fuse block:
(IGN SENSOR). See Instrument Panel Fuse Block
on page 5-95 for more information.
When dinghy towing, the vehicle should be run at
the beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for
about five minutes. This will ensure proper lubrication
of transmission components.
5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
6. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
7. Release the parking brake.
Remember to reinstall the IGN SENSOR fuse once you
have reached your destination.
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
To dinghy tow the vehicle from the front with all four
wheels on the ground:
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it to the
towing vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission to P (Park) and turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Never have your vehicle towed from
the rear.
To tow the vehicle with two wheels on the ground
and a dolly:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the gear shift lever in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
Dolly Towing
Tow the vehicle with the two rear wheels on the ground
and the front wheels on a dolly:
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Remove the key from the ignition.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Do not tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on a dolly.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of your vehicle, you should read the information
in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this
section. Trailering is different than just driving your
vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering
takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
Towing a Trailer
{ CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with your
vehicle.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra
heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part and see your dealer/retailer
for important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
retailer about sway controls.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1000 miles
(1600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged. The
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a
trailer are all important. It can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle, and the amount
of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the
Trailer Tongue” later in this section for more information.
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (89 km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
You can ask your dealer/retailer for trailering information
or advice.
• Don’t tow a trailer when the outside temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-24 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label, See Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-24. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if
it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
Trailer Brakes
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, don’t try to tap into
your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do,
both brake systems won’t work well, or at all.
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes, so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,
then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
water can, too.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Passing
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer when towing a trailer, you’ll need to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return
to your lane.
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. See your
retailer if you need information. The arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn
or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer
lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re
about to turn, change lanes or stop.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Parking on Hills
{ CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
Driving on Grades
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher
than normal engine and transmission temperatures
may result and damage your vehicle. Frequent
stops are very important to allow the engine and
transmission to cool.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P).
When parking uphill, turn your wheels away from
the curb. When parking downhill, turn your wheels
into the curb.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating. If your engine does overheat,
2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailer
wheels.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive belt,
cooling system and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find
them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review this information before you start your trip.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
• start your engine
• shift into a gear, and
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-30.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing
If you get a flat tire while towing a trailer, be sure
to secure the trailer and disconnect it from the vehicle
before changing the tire.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
page 6-4 for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine Saturn parts and Saturn-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine GM
Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information,
see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you should use the proper service manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-16.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list the mileage and the date of any service work
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of the Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This can cause
wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Octane
Gasoline Specifications
If your vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code B) or
the 3.5L V6 engine (VIN Code N), use regular unleaded
gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher.
If the octane rating is less than 87, you might notice
an audible knocking noise when you drive, commonly
referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you
are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
for additional information.
California Fuel
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer
towing, you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fuel door is located on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
To open the fuel door, apply pressure on the center of
the rear edge of the fuel door and it will pop open.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping the fuel before removing the nozzle. Clean
fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
To remove the tethered fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the clockwise
until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the CHECK GAS CAP message displays if the fuel cap
is not properly installed.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage your
fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if
this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
others:
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
Checking Things Under
the Hood
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
handle with this symbol
on it. It is located
inside the vehicle to
the left of the steering
column.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer
and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release handle toward the driver
side of the vehicle.
3. Lift the hood.
4. After the hood is slightly lifted, it will continue to
open to the full position. Before closing the hood,
be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Lower the
hood until the lifting force of the strut is reduced,
then release the hood to latch fully. Check to make
sure the hood is closed and repeat the process
if necessary.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
page 5-33.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of view). See “Checking
page 5-27.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine, this is what you see:
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
page 5-33.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
K. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
page 5-27.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 3.6L V6 engine, this is what you see:
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
I. Automatic transmission Fluid Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
E. Electric Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View).
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-38.
page 5-27.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Add Engine Oil
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
2.4L L4 Engine
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
3.5L V6 Engine
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview on page 5-14
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the
dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
the engine could be damaged.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide
easier cold starting and better protection for
the engine at extremely low temperatures.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. If you are in
an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls
below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL SOON message will come on. See DIC
as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an oil
change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you need for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON
message being turned on, reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
After changing the engine oil and filter, the system must
be reset. To reset the oil life system:
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
three times within five seconds.
If the message is not displayed, the system is reset.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back
on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
1. Remove the spring clamps that hold the cover on.
2. Lift off the cover.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Align the filter correctly using the alignment tab.
5. Install the cover by guiding the tabs on the rim of
the top cover into the bottom hinges and turn the
cover down to close it.
6. The spring clips will engage easily, if the cover is
properly seated.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-30.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealer/retailer
and have it repaired as soon as possible.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
For the 2.4L, 3.5L and 3.6L engines, the transmission
fluid will not reach the end of the dipstick unless
the transmission is at operating temperature. If you
need to check the transmission fluid level, please
take your vehicle to your dealer/retailer.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but would
not get the overheat warning. The engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{ CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD mark or slightly higher.
The engine coolant surge tank is located in the rear of
the engine compartment.
more information on location.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Pressure Cap
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool. If the surge tank is empty, a special
fill procedure is necessary. See Engine Overheating
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
more information on location.
{ CAUTION:
Engine Overheating
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains eythylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage as
well as an engine coolant temperature warning light on
your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with
no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{ CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning, can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine
is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of
the vehicle until the engine is cool.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
to a safe place in an emergency.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (NEUTRAL) and let
the engine idle.
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature gage will indicate
an overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles
(km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection
mode should be avoided.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil
on page 5-20.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you are parked. If you still have
the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out
of the vehicle until it cools down.
You might decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{ CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, this is what
you see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can cause injury. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
3.5L V6 Engine shown, 2.4L L4,
3.6L V6 Engines similar
A. Engine Cooling Fans
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
C. Pressure Cap
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark on the coolant surge tank. If it is not,
you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump,
or somewhere else in the cooling system.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank,
but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but
you would not get the overheat warning.
The engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the FULL COLD mark. Wait about five minutes,
then check to see if the level is below the mark.
If the level is below the FULL COLD mark,
add additional coolant to bring the level up to the
mark. Repeat this procedure until the level remains
constant at the FULL COLD mark for at least
five minutes.
{ CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains eythylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans.
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about two or two and one-half turns.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank might be lower. If the level is lower than
the FULL COLD mark, add more of the proper
mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the FULL COLD mark.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will
allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
reservoir location.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
If your vehicle has the 3.5L V6 engine, the fluid level
should be between the ADD and HOT marks when the
engine is cold, and at the HOT mark when the engine
is hot. If the fluid is at the ADD mark when the engine
is cold or hot, power steering fluid should be added.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power steering fluid is used in all vehicles with
V6 engines. Vehicles with the 4-cylinder engine
have electric power steering and do not use power
steering fluid.
If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine, the fluid level
should be between the MIN (Minimum) and MAX
(Maximum) marks when the engine is cold, and at the
MAX mark when the engine is hot. If the fluid is at the
MIN mark when the engine is cold or hot, power steering
fluid should be added.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless a leak is suspected in the system, or
an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
The fluid level should be within the crosshatch area on
the dipstick.
If the fluid is at or below the ADD or MIN mark on
the dipstick, add just enough fluid to bring the level
within the crosshatch area.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
on page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Adding Washer Fluid
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,
a LOW WASHER FLUID message displays on
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding brake fluid will
not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the reservoir.
{ CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could be
burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is done on
the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is, have
the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means
that sooner or later the brakes will not work well.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the BRAKE
FLUID message in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
page 3-47.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
Use only new DOT-3 brake fluid from a sealed
container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
{ CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard
all the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
{ CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for
the worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts
in the proper sequence to torque specifications
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When
it is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer
for one that has the replacement number shown on
the original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is
located under a red tethered cap on the battery.
The negative (–) terminal is located under a
black tethered cap on the battery. See Engine
information on location. Flip the caps up to access
the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals.
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
{ CAUTION:
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always connect and
remove the jumper cables in the correct order,
making sure that the cables do not touch each
other or other metal.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
Jumper Cable Removal
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (–) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (–) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
Halogen Bulbs
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
5. Return the caps over the positive (+) and
negative (–) terminals to their original positions.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace a sidemarker lamp, turn signal lamp, or a
back-up lamp:
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
2. Remove the convenience net.
3. Remove the wing nuts holding the trunk trim and
pull the trunk trim straight back.
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp
C. Backup Lamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
If a stoplamp or a taillamp needs to be replaced, see
your dealer/retailer.
4. Turn the three wing nuts counterclockwise that hold
the taillamp assembly counterclockwise.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove the taillamp assembly.
License Plate Lamp
6. Remove the wiring harness from the taillamp
assembly by lifting the release tab.
To replace the license plate lamp bulb:
7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.
8. Pull the bulb from the socket.
9. Install a new bulb.
10. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall.
11. Reinstall the wiring harness and press down on the
release tab.
12. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and turn the
three wing nuts clockwise.
13. Reinstall the trunk trim and wing nuts.
1. Turn the two screws that hold the license plate lamp
assembly counterclockwise to remove them.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
4. Push the new bulb in and turn it clockwise to install.
5. Push the license plate lamp in and turn it through
the fascia opening.
Inspect the windshield wiper blades for wear or cracking.
6. Turn the two screws that hold the license plate
lamp clockwise to reinstall.
To remove the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Bulb Number
921
License Plate Lamp and Rear
Sidemarker Lamp
168
Turn Signal Lamp
3156
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
2. Push the release button.
3. Slide the blade forward.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the blade toward you and continue to slide
forward.
5. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked
when your vehicle’s tires are cold.
page 5-58.
• Overinflated tires are more likely
to be cut, punctured, or broken by
a sudden impact — such as when
you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
{ CAUTION:
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or
if your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact
spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
on page 5-73.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 5-58.
Compact Spare Tire Example
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type, and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire
size means the tire is for temporary use only.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it
is wide.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the
maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-58.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date
of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 4-24.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire
on page 4-24.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 5-66.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should
be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
additional information.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
on page 3-47.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel
assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure
in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS turns on the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
A Tire and Loading Information label shows the size of
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are
example of the Tire and Loading Information label and
its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in
a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
on are:
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer
for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message comes on and stays on.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and
TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS
sensor matching process is performed successfully.
See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this
section.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel location.
The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel locations,
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press and hold the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, at the
same time, for about five seconds to start the TPMS
learn mode. The horn sounds twice indicating the
TPMS receiver is ready and in learn mode.
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side
front turn signal also comes on to indicate that
corner’s sensor is ready to be learned.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve
stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing
or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for about
eight seconds. The horn chirp, can take up to
30 seconds to sound. It chirps one time and then
all the turn signals flash one time to confirm the
sensor identification code has been matched to
the tire/wheel position.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match
any tire and wheel position, the matching process stops
and you need to start over.
6. The passenger side front turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side front tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. The passenger side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs
of wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
8. The driver side rear turn signal comes on to
indicate that corner sensor is ready to be learned.
Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
9. After hearing the single horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, two additional horn chirps sound
to indicate the tire learning process is done.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to
achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that your vehicle continues to
perform most like it did when the tires were new.
If no tires are learned after entering the TPMS learn
mode, or if communication with the receiver stops, or
if the time limit has expired, turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF and start over beginning with Step 2.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
page 4-24.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
tread remaining.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this
aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all tires
will help keep your vehicle performing most like
it did when the tires were new. Replacing less
than a full set of tires can affect the braking
and handling performance of your vehicle.
for information on proper tire rotation.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This
way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as the original tires.
{ CAUTION:
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers
over a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and handling, traction
control, and tire pressure monitoring performance.
GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an
all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by an MS for mud and snow. See
information.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may
not handle properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.
It is all right to drive with your compact
spare temporarily, as it was developed for
use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system could give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may
give a low-pressure warning that is higher or lower
than the proper warning level you would get with
TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks
after many miles of driving. A tire and/or
wheel could fail suddenly, causing a
crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on the vehicle.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)
as your vehicle’s original tires.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control, and
stability control, the performance of these systems can
be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
{ CAUTION:
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will crash
and suffer serious injury. Only use Saturn
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a Saturn certified technician.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
{ WARNING:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
than the minimum required by law.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
{ WARNING:
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other,
the alignment might need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced.
See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new Saturn
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure
to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
{ CAUTION:
Used Replacement Wheels
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new Saturn original
equipment wheel.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
CAUTION: (Continued)
device if it is contacting the vehicle, and do
not spin the vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them on
the front tires.
{ CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
the vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak
out slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to the
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would use
in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
CAUTION: (Continued)
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
information.
2. Lift the handle on the spare tire cover. The handle
can hook on the front edge of the trunk’s
weatherstrip to hold the cover out of the way.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
3. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it.
Then remove the compact spare tire. See Compact
The following information tells you how to use the jack
and change a tire.
4. Remove the wing nut holding the jack in place.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove the extension bolt that is clipped to the
jack. You need this later to store the flat tire.
6. Remove the jack and wheel wrench from the trunk.
1. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise to
loosen the wheel wrench.
2. Unhook the wheel wrench from the jack.
The tools you will be using include the wheel wrench (A)
and jack (B).
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. Please
information.
2. If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap that
has plastic wheel nut caps, then loosen the plastic
nut caps. You might need to use the wheel wrench to
loosen them. Do not pry off wheel covers or center
caps that have plastic wheel nut caps.
3. Remove the wheel cover or center cap from the
wheel to locate the wheel nuts.
If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap without
plastic wheel nut caps, carefully pry on the edge
of the plastic wheel trim to remove it from the wheel
to find the wheel nuts.
3. Extend the handle on the wheel wrench by pressing
the button with your index finger and pulling on
the end of the wrench. You must do this before
using the wheel wrench.
Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you have
the flat repaired or replaced.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
5. Position the lift head at the jack location nearest the
flat tire. Make sure all of the jack lift head is touching
the jacking flange under the body. Do not place the
jack under a body panel. The lower body panel has
an arrow to aid in locating the jacking location.
6. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit underneath the wheel well.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-74.
9. Remove the flat tire.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
11. Install the compact spare tire.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
{ CAUTION:
sequence, as shown,
with the wheel wrench.
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you
have to replace them, be sure to get new
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
nut torque specification.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could
be damaged.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
page 5-104 for the wheel nut torque specification.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
To store the flat tire and jack in the compact spare tire
compartment:
3. Place the jack over the bolt (A) on the floor, making
sure it contacts the bolt as shown, and thread the
jack retainer nut until it contacts the jack.
information.
4. With the valve stem up, place the tire on the
compartment floor with the rear of the tire beneath
the trim panel (tire may not lay completely flat).
2. Remove the bolt extension (in the yellow sleeve)
from the jack and remove the center cap from the
wheel.
5. Line up the center hole of the wheel with the bolt.
6. With the yellow cap in place to prevent the
wheel from being scratched, screw the bolt
extension onto the bolt through the wheel nut hole.
7. Remove the yellow cap from the bolt extension.
8. Secure the tire and wheel with the larger wing nut.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop as
soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly
inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at
speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to
3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip
and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare
with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire
will last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed
again.
A. Cover
E. Bracket
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire
and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
B. Retainer
C. Spare Tire
D. Wing Nut
F. Jack, Wheel Wrench,
and Bolt Extension
G. Bolt
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon
See the storage instructions label to replace your
compact spare into your trunk properly.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains
on your compact spare.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean your vehicle using:
Fabric/Carpet
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For any soil, always try to remove it first with plain
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as
much of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to your vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
your interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage your vehicle’s interior.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To clean:
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot
lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the
locally cleaned area gives any impression that a
ring formation may result, clean the entire surface.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that
can damage the emblems or nameplates on
your vehicle. Check the cleaning product label.
If it states that it should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on your vehicle or damage may
occur and it would not be covered by the warranty.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-88.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Aluminum Wheels
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such
as ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended
for all bright metal parts.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could be damaged.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Tires
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underbody Maintenance
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke, and fingerprints.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
Usage
Vehicle Identification
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Swirl Remover Polish
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Cleans, shines, and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Wash Wax Concentrate
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.
Removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl, and
cloth upholstery.
Spot Lifter
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather, and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Electrical System
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine
Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-104 for your vehicle’s engine code.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as they
should.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the
overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it
fixed.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Fuses
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible links. This greatly reduces the chance of
damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
to replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: one in
the center of the instrument panel, one in the engine
compartment and one in the trunk.
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger side of the vehicle, on the lower portion
of the instrument panel near the floor.
There is a fuse puller located on the instrument panel
fuse block. It can be used to easily remove fuses
from the fuse block.
Remove the panel cover to access the fuse block, then
remove the fuse block cover to access the fuses.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle might not have all the fuses and features listed.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
POWER
Usage
Fuses
Usage
IGN SENSOR
Ignition Switch
Power Mirrors
MIRRORS
STRG WHL
ILLUM
Steering Wheel Illumination
EPS
Electronic Power Steering
Cruise Control Switch, Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator
NOT
RUN/CRANK
HVAC
Not Used
INSTALLED
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
BLOWER HIGH Blower - High Speed Relay
RADIO
Audio System
Interior Lamps
INTERIOR
LIGHTS
CLUSTER/
THEFT
Instrument Panel Cluster,
Theft Deterrent System
OnStar®
NOT
INSTALLED
Not Used
ONSTAR
NOT
INSTALLED
POWER
WINDOWS
Not Used
Power Windows
AIRBAG (IGN) Airbag (Ignition)
HVAC CTRL
(IGN)
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Control (Ignition)
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
HVAC CTRL
(BATT)
Control Diagnostic Link Connector
(Battery)
HVAC
BLOWER
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning
Blower Switch
PEDAL
Adjustable Pedals
DOOR LOCK
Door Locks
WIPER SW
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Spare Fuse Holder
ROOF/HEAT
SEAT
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
Sunroof, Power Windows
NOT
INSTALLED
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
Not Used
NOT
INSTALLED
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Not Used
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all the fuses and
features listed.
AIRBAG
(BATT)
Airbag (Battery)
Spare Fuse Holder
Spare Fuse Holder
Spare Fuse Holder
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the engine compartment, near the battery.
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
HOLDER
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
Air Conditioner Clutch
Transmission Control Module
Ignition 1
4
Electronic Throttle Control
Engine Control Module IGN 1 (LZ4)
5
6
Mass Airflow Sensor (LY7)
Emission
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Left Headlamp Low-Beam
Horn
Fuses
23
Usage
Rear Electrical Center 2
Antilock Brake System
Body Control Module 2
Starter
7
8
24
9
Right Headlamp Low-Beam
Front Fog Lamps
25
10
11
12
26
Left Headlamp High-Beam
Right Headlamp High-Beam
41
Electric Power Steering
Transmission Control Module
Battery
42
43
44
45
Engine Control Module BATT
(LY7 & LE5)
13
Ignition Module (LZ4 & LE5);
Injectors, Ignition Coils Odd (LY7)
14
15
Windshield Wiper
Injectors (LZ4 & LE5); Injectors,
Ignition Coils Even (LY7)
Antilock Brake System (IGN 1)
Engine Control Module IGN 1
(LY7 & LE5)
Post Cat 02 Sensor Heaters
(LY7 & LZ4)
16
17
18
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
46
47
50
51
52
53
54
Daytime Running Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
Driver Power Window
Run Relay, Heating, Ventilation,
Air Conditioning Blower
19
Engine Control Module BATT (LZ4)
DC/AC Inverter
20
21
22
Body Control Module 1
Body Control Module Run/Crank
Rear Electrical Center 1
Antilock Brake System BATT
Regulated Voltage Control
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Compartment Fuse Block
Relays
28
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
29
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Cooling Fan 2
30
31
Starter
32
Run/Crank, Ignition
Powertrain
33
34
Air Conditioning Clutch
High Beam
35
36
Front Fog Lamps
Horn
37
38
Low-Beam Headlamp
Windshield Wiper 1
Windshield Wiper 2
Daytime Running Lamps
Stoplamps
39
The rear compartment fuse block is located in the trunk
of the vehicle. Access the fuse block through the
trunk panel on the driver side of the rear cargo area.
40
48
49
Diodes
Usage
27
Wiper
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Passenger Seat Controls
Driver Seat Controls
Not Used
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
5
Emission 2, Canister Vent Solenoid
Park Lamps, Instrument Panel
Dimming
6
7
Not Used
Not Used
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
8
Usage
Fuses
23
Usage
Usage
Not Used
Not Used
Rear Defog
Heated Mirrors
Fuel Pump
9
24
10
11
12
13
14
15
Sunroof Controls
Not Used
25
Relays
Not Used
26
Rear Window Defogger
Park Lamps
Not Used
Audio Amplifier
Heated Seat Controls
Not Used
27
28
29
Not Used
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System, XM™ Satellite Radio,
UGDO
16
30
Not Used
31
Not Used
17
18
19
20
21
22
Back-up Lamps
Not Used
32
Not Used
33
Back-up Lamps
Not Used
Not Used
34
Auxiliary Power Outlets
Not Used
35
36
Not Used
Trunk Release
Fuel Pump
Cargo Lamp
Trunk Release
37
38 (Diode)
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your retailer/dealer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission – 4 Speed (Bottom Pan Removal)
Automatic Transmission – 6 Speed
Cooling System
7.0 qt
9.5 qt
6.6 L
9.0 L
2.4L L4 Engine
7.5 qt
9.7 qt
7.1 L
9.2 L
3.5L V6 Engine and 3.6L V6 Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L L4 Engine
5.0 qt
4.0 qt
5.5 qt
4.7 L
3.8 L
5.2 L
3.5L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
English
16.3 gal
100 lb ft
Metric
61.7 L
Fuel Tank
Wheel Nut Torque
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
2.4L L4
3.5L V6
3.6L V6
VIN Code
Transmission
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
B
N
7
0.040 inches (1.0 mm)
0.044 inches (1.1 mm)
0.044 inches (1.1 mm)
Automatic
Automatic
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by warranty.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 4-24.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and
to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to
maintain your vehicle properly.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-6.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
should be checked, when to check it, and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
{ CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your Own
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
might be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that
vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However, the
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/
retailer has trained service technicians who will perform
this work using genuine parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message
comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was
purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
3.6L Engine Only: Check automatic transmission fluid level and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
2.4L (Code B) L4 and 3.5L (Code N)
V6 Engines Only: Change automatic
transmission fluid and filter (severe
service only). See footnote (h).
3.6L (Code 7) V6 Engine Only: Change
automatic transmission fluid (severe
service). See footnote (l).
•
•
•
3.6L (Code 7) V6 Engine Only: Change
automatic transmission fluid (normal
service).
•
•
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug
wires. An Emission Control Service.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
•
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 5-50 and Windshield and Wiper Blades
on page 5-90 for more information.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect electric power steering cables
for proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
hydraulic power steering lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunk lid hinges
and latches. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle
safety, dependability, and emission control performance.
Your dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and
services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
page 5-58. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-64.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-31.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN, but
do not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of
PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism
Check
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Anchor, and Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Engine Oil
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 109435474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Hood and
Door Hinges
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-27.
Engine
Coolant
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Hydraulic
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
Brake System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic
Power
Steering
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
System
(if equipped)
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your Saturn
retailer/dealer.
Part
Part Numbers
ACDelco Part Numbers
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
22676970
A1627C
2.4L L4 Engine
12605566
PF457G
89017342
or
89017525
PF61
or
PF63
3.5L V6 Engine*
3.6L V6 Engine
Spark Plugs
89017524
PF48
2.4L L4 Engine
12598004
12591131
12597464
41-103
41-100
41-990
3.5L V6 Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
Windshield Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 23.6 inches (60.0 cm)
25800624
25800623
—
—
Passenger Side – 21.0 inches (53.0 cm)
*Check the part number of the oil filter installed on the engine. 89017342 (PF61) and 89017525 (PF63) are not
interchangeable.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6L V6 Engine
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance,
in the U.S., contact the Saturn Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada, call
the Saturn Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance
Center team member will handle your call and assist
in providing product and warranty information, the
nearest retailer location, roadside assistance, brochures,
literature and discuss any concerns you may have.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committed to
providing our customers with unparalleled service,
before, during, and after the purchase of a Saturn vehicle,
for total customer satisfaction. We call this the Saturn
Difference. Normally, any concerns with the sales
transaction or the operation of the vehicle are resolved
by the retailer’s sales or service departments. If, for any
reason, your ownership experience falls below your
expectations, we suggest you take the following action:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This 17-digit
number can be found on the vehicle registration
or title, on the upper driver side corner of the
instrument panel, or on your roadside assistance
key card.
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer Assistance
Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has
the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns.
Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.
• The name of your selling and servicing retail facility.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
When contacting Saturn, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and
its retailers are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, Saturn and
its retailers offer the additional assistance of a neutral
party through our voluntary participation in a mediation/
arbitration program called Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line.
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using the toll-free
telephone number or by writing them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
This program is available at no cost to you, our customer.
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle
age, mileage and other factors. Saturn Corporation
reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case is
generally heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with
the decision given in your case, you can reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may call
the Saturn Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-1999, or you may write to:
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have
been addressed after following the procedure outlined
in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved
by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include
an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in approximately
70 days. We believe our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because
it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
This is a resource for your Saturn ownership needs.
Specific vehicle information can be found in one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gmcanada.com.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, write to:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
To assist owners who have hearing difficulties, Saturn
has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices
for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer
Assistance Center.
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-1999
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Any hearing or speech-impaired customer who has
access to a TDD or to a conventional Text Telephone
(TTY) can communicate with Saturn by dialing
1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada may dial
1-800-263-3830.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Customer Assistance Offices
Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a customer wishes to write to
Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
1-800-553-6000
1-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle such as hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
Services Provided
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever comes first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum of $100.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 Canada). In Canada, service to
provide diesel may be restricted. For safety reasons,
propane and other alternative fuels are not provided
through this service.
In Canada, customers may call the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in
Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
• Lock-Out Service: Lock-out service is covered at
no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your
vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if you
have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call 1-800-553-6000;
(Text Telephone (TTY): 1-800-889-2438).
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
identification before lock-out service is provided.
In Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside
Assistance Program.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn retailer for
warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling
crash. Winch-out assistance is provided when the
vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner
is not eligible for coverage.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) lodging (maximum of $100/night), and
(C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of
$40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some of
the unplanned expense you may incur while waiting
for your vehicle to be repaired.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair order are required.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada Only): Upon
request, Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the most
scenic route to your destination, anywhere in North
America, along with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
• Alternative Service (Canada Only): There could be
times when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests are limited to
six per calendar year.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada Only): In the event of a warranty related
vehicle disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from the original point of departure,
you might qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of $500
(Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of $50/day),
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an
owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calling for Assistance
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representatives:
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on
a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing
caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State, Provincial
or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or changing of
snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to make any changes or discontinue the
Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Saturn helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your retailer can offer you one of the following:
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating retailers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Retailers may provide you
with shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the retailer’s area.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the retailer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by Saturn for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your retailer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every retailer. Please contact your retailer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate retailer personnel.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your retailer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
Saturn reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change
or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant
to the terms and conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in
your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or
you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are drivable.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it could
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it could
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your retailer or Saturn
Corporation.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or write:
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Manuals
A variety of publications are available to you. Saturn
service manuals are written for trained technicians, and
in some cases, specialized tools and equipment are
necessary to complete certain repairs. However,
the manuals are available to owners who either have
the training, or wish to gain a greater understanding of
the technical aspect of their Saturn.
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify Saturn.
Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
For additional publications information or to order
publications in the United States, call toll free
1-800-2-SATURN or visit www.saturn-publications.com
to order on-line.
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by
calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small
number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified
technician may have to determine if a specific
bulletin applies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,
call Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
saturn-publications.com to order online.
Owner Publications
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as
described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states
and the District of Columbia, and only for cars and
light trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
less than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of
individual bulletins are also at your participating
Saturn retailer. You can ask to see them.
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
In Canada, information relating to product service
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your Saturn
retailer.
Your Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
Service Bulletins
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors product
performance in the field. We then prepare bulletins
for servicing our products better. You can get these
bulletins, too.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the
proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe
costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs
which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid
future costly repairs.
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new
or unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker way
to fix your vehicle. They can help a technician service
your vehicle better.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
Saturn will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
government office; as part of Saturn’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that Saturn collects or receives may also be used
for Saturn research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown and
the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
manual for more information.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in Saturn vehicles does not
use or record personal information or link with any other
Saturn system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine (cont.)
E
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-47
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-43
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service, Scheduling Appointments ....................... 7-9
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-74
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-17
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
